Owner`s manual | Dodge 2010 Grand Caravan Automobile User Manual

2010
OWNER’ S MANUAL
Grand Caravan
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
Vehicle Identification Number
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 19
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . 42
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . 46
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Airbag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 74
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped . . 83
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 61
▫ Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 86
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Rear Seat Delete Feature
(Commercial Vehicles Only) — If Equipped . . . . . 96
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children With
Seat Delete Feature
(Commercial Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 99
11
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON position.
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACCESSORY
— ON
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob.
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK or
ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
15
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the Replacement Keys
engine being shut off after two seconds.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
subject to the following conditions:
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho• This device must accept any interference that may be
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
received, including interference that may cause undesblank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key
ired operation.
Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthe authorized dealer.
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the headlights, park
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start the
vehicle.
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
17
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. The Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for
about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set.
After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash
at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
Arming The System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
NOTE:
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
door is open, or press the LOCK button on the Remote
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
doors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the switch is turned ON.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights vehicle to activate the system.
do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
lights ON position (extreme top position).
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
• The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
dimmer control is in the extreme downward position. transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power Vehicles built without the powered options will be
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transdoor from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) mitters, and those built with power options will be
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
Using the RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN- (optional). Some features can be programmed to the
LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
Remote Unlock Doors and Liftgate
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performtransmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
ing the following steps:
unlock all doors and liftgate. The Illuminated Entry
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
system also turns on.
vehicle.
Remote Key Unlock on First Press
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
while still holding the LOCK button.
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In3. Release both buttons at the same time.
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Cus- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by presstomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Remote Lock Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once
to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Remote Open Window Feature
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
vehicle.
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
23
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThe Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob
time, or you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
removed.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
its previous setting.
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- noises of the system.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
Alarm.
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the LIFTGATE button twice
will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area.
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door —
If Equipped
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being powerpressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.
console.
Turn Off Flash Lights with RKE Lock —
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
If Equipped
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitPower Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door —
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
If Equipped
the current setting, proceed as follows:
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforpower-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
mation.
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitfollowing steps:
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Alarm.
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
The following table explains the Lamp Flash options.
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
Which Turn
Number of
still holding the UNLOCK button.
Function
Signal Lamps
Flashes
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Lock
All
1
Left Side
2
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- Unlock 1st Press
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Unlock All Doors
All
2
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Left Side
Left Side
2
Key Fob removed.
Right Side
Right Side
2
All
2
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to Liftgate
its previous setting.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
General Information
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
battery.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
operation.
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
flat blade to pry the battery door and transmitter housing distance, check for these two conditions.
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the life of the battery is approximately three years.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the battery
door and transmitter housing together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
27
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON position before you
can repeat the start sequence.
To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position,
will automatically lock the doors.
otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15- minute
cycle.
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
• For security, power window and power sunroof opthe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, • The hood is opened
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
• The hazard switch is pressed
switch to the ON position.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in • The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
order to drive the vehicle.
cycle
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Turn to ON”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to
ON.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Cancel Remote Start
Start button to shutdown the engine for two seconds after
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following receiving a valid Remote Start request.
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock plunger is down when you shut either front
When to Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one the vehicle before closing the door.
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting
a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch and rotating the
Key Fob to the ON position, and then rotating the Key
Fob back to the LOCK/OFF position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock
plungers on each door trim panel.
Manual Door Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock plunger is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Sliding Door Lock
31
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition switch, and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 - Unlock
2 - Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
Lock Doors Automatically — If Equipped
If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, the
door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when
your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can
be disabled by using the following procedure:
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Doors Lock
3 - Doors Unlock
• On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
perform the following steps:
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this feature can be reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the
programming procedure.)
EVIC (if equipped), Personal Settings (Customer3. Place the Key Fob into the ignition.
Programmable Features).
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from the
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit —
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
If Equipped
five times, ending in the ON position (do not start the
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
engine).
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
in the LOCK direction.
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
closed).
been disabled.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was door locks (lock or unlock).
canceled before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat the previous procedure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
35
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
perform the following steps:
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
sary, repeat the previous procedure.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
programming procedure.)
or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer3. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch.
Programmable Features on vehicles so equipped.
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from the NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
five times ending in the ON position (do not start the features in accordance with local laws.
engine).
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
Switches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driver
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
operate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat.
the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Power Vent Window Switch
1 – Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
Driver’s Power Window Switches
1 – Right Rear
2 – Left Rear
3 – Right Front
4 – Left Front
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
37
2
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depressing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Power Window Lockout Switch
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position and during power accessory delay.
Front Passenger Power Window Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Doors Lock
3 - Doors Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
2
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
NOTE:
part way and release it when you want the window to
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autostop.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
The power window switches remain active for up to
switch again to close the window.
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)
after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoAuto Up Feature With Anti–Pinch Protection —
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
If Equipped
first detent and hold to close window manually.
The front Driver switch may be equipped with an Auto
Up feature. Lift the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurthe window path before closing.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
steps after vehicle power is restored:
minimize the buffeting.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an SLIDING SIDE DOOR
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
detent to open the window completely and continue to sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
the window is fully open.
hold open latch in order to close the door.
WARNING!
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
lowing guidelines:
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
• Always open the door smoothly.
fuel door.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when openPower Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
The power sliding door may be opened or closed manuis parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
ally or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter,
the downhill direction.
overhead console switch, or rear door switch. Pulling the
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the inside or outside power sliding door handle will also
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your power open or close the power sliding door.
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
exterior handle.
closed manually.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
2
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the
rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the
driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once will
open the power sliding door. When the door is fully open
pressing the switch a second time will close the door.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
Power Sliding Door
1 — Heated Seat
2 — Power Window
3 — Manual Lock
4 — Door Handle
5 — Power Sliding Door
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled.
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors • If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstrucfrom the rear seats, press the power sliding door master
tions within the same cycle, the system will automatilock button, located in the overhead console, to disable the
cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.
switches and handles for the rear seat passengers.
WARNING!
NOTE:
• The power sliding side door switches will not open if You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with before closing the door.
the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph
(0 km/h), the brake must be pressed.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
while it is closing or opening, the door will automatialert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided
entering or exiting the vehicle.
it meets sufficient resistance.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
is fully open and then press the switch again.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/LOCK five times ending opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating
in the ON position (do not start the engine).
the inside power sliding door handle.
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZARD switch.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the ON side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
ON position, the power sliding side door may not be
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Door
4 — Master Lock
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Child Protection Door Lock
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
Lock.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
seats, press the ”ON” Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console, next to the
driver.
47
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
always test the door from the inside to make certain it the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the trim
panel just in front of the power sliding door when the
shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever
position.
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
Liftgate Handle Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
49
2
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Door
4 — Master Lock
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash to
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
51
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
WARNING!
be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. • Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperathat span the front, second, and third row seating for
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
the driver and passengers seated next to a window —
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
if equipped
•
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if
equipped
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen- • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
ger
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
53
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
collision.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
Please pay close attention to the information in this and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system far away from home or on your own street.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
55
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
2
Removing Slack from Belt
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assemthe lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”. bly.
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
headliner.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
Adjustable Anchorage
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
61
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
If Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
worn snugly and positioned properly.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Reimpact requires deployment, both the driver and front
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensionpassenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
63
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
AHR In Reset Position
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passenNOTE:
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
dealer.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warning system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
BeltAlert威 Programming
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
dealer or by following these steps:
belt.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
single chime will sound to signify that you have successor START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recomfully completed the programming.
mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
67
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwhile the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled or tender and stow it.
retracted.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
Seat Belt Extender
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
1 — Driver and Passenger Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a winNOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Front Airbag Components
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
but they will open during airbag deployment.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
authorized dealer immediately.
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag • Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
system components:
Front Passenger
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) —
If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
but they will open during airbag deployment.
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain airbag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
73
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙ in this manual.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
(Continued) Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based
on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags — if
equipped, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if
equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — if
equipped, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
75
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi- good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in deployed.
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collitype of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not exsions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
away from an inflating airbag.
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
collisions, including some that may produce substantial the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
hand, depending on the type and location of impact, system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to six seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
comes on again after initial startup.
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differalso record the nature of the malfunction.
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Inflator
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
until the ignition key is turned off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
Front and Side Impact Sensors
removed.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
• Unlock the doors automatically.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
after deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
79
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have depassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Reparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
straint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately four to six seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to six-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
81
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
In conjunction with other data gathered during a comdata that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. governabout the possible causes of crashes and associated
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfornature, such as would identify a particular driver, vemance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be redata will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
third party except when:
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur- 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
ance organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com- preserved.
pany or its designated representative will first obtain 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the Group LLC product.
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
The booster seat is designed to raise the child high
enough to use the vehicle lap and shoulder belt. The
Data parameters that are recorded:
booster seat latch release handle is located at the front of
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for the seat cushion.
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
4. Otherwise required by law.
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
• Pedal position
• And other parameters
configuration
depending
on
vehicle
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat (if equipped) is located
in each second-row passenger seat. The booster seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
Booster Seat Release Handle
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Pull the release handle forward to release the latch and
seat cushion. Then, lift seat cushion up and push back to
lock it in the booster seat position.
Booster Seat Position
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or death:
• The swivel seat should be locked in the forwardfacing position when using the booster seat with
the vehicle in motion.
• Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat cushion could cause serious injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
85
2. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
3. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
2
4. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
5. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
6. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
Integrated Child Booster Seat
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped
Operating instructions for the second row bench seat
with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If
the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner’s
Manual Package, replacement instruction can be obtained.
To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instructions: Refer to “Publication Order Forms” in ⬙If You Need
Consumer Assistance⬙ and specify publication number
81–016–8050 when ordering.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
87
• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old
and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child
restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt
or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer
to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
injury or death to infants in this position.
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
• Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers must vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
NEVER be used while the second row Swivel ’n Go restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
seats are in the rearward-facing position.
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never place any child seat, booster seat, or infant
carrier in the Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in the
rearward-facing position. The swivel seat should be
locked in the forward position when using any child
seat, booster seat, or infant carriers, with the vehicle
in motion. Failure to do so could result in serious
injury or even death.
An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If the
child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,
they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use both the lap and shoulder belt. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
89
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
(Continued)
2
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating must be
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position. Failure
to do so could result in serious injury or even
death.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
restraint:
tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
necessary.
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
where you will use it, before you buy it.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
weight and height limits.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
91
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
try a different seating position.
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the
installation instructions that are provided with the child
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
restraint system.
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
cause serious personal injury.
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
2
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc- located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all
tions that come with the child restraint system.
third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system
called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-row seats and in
the center position on all third row fold-in-floor seats.
NOTE:
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being
used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach
of children. It is recommended that before installing the
child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is
tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the
child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow
the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible, 4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly pushinstall the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
ing the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment
Installing the Lower Attachments:
straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for infor1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located mation on properly removing slack.
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint
attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat instructions) to ease the installation.
NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap
and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so
the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle
seat and child restraint.
3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to
the vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower
attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is
secure.
LATCH Anchorages
2
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the Top Tether Strap
(with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):
1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head
restraint between the steel posts.
2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint instructions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor
located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook
is firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,
regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing the Child Restraint Using the Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
95
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Once you have completed securing the child restraint
with the seat belt secure the top tether strap. Refer to
⬙Installing the Top Tether Strap⬙ for further details.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL
VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger airbag.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardfacing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
97
• The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearwardfacing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEADelete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convertThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ible seat is properly installed facing forward, the
children from newborn size to the child almost large
vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
position.
correct for your child:
• The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weighing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
2
98
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles with
Rear Seat Delete
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
condition that might affect the performance of the strap is
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized dealrear of the front passenger seat.
ership for a replacement part.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement
part.
99
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interDrive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). preted as an indication of difficulty.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
100
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
101
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control Vehicle
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
Seat Belts
recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
102
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
103
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
104
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 110
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 110
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 114
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 114
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 112
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 112
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 113
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Front And Second Row
Seat Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 124
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . 152
▫ Eight–Way Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 126
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Adjusting Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . 132
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Easy Access Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 157
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . 144
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped . . . 145
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 158
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 159
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Deactivating Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . 169
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Resuming Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Varying The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Accelerating To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 171
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Windshield Wiper And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 164
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Enabling/Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Service Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 168
▫ Cleaning Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 178
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . 182
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Power Sunroof Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 195
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . 182
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Front Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 200
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 190
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 203
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
109
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 209
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Load-Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. The
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for mirror selection will also automatically turn off after
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled 30 seconds.
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirror Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch located on the driver’s door
trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside
mirrors. Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) for
mirror selection. Press the mirror select switch again to
Power Side Mirror Adjust
1 — Left Mirror
2 — Right Mirror
3 — Adjusting Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory
direction you want the mirror to move.
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can be
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding the
will move slightly downward from the present position
Features of Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
outside mirror will then return to the original position
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Mirrors in Reverse position.
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not eninformation.
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Mirror
Rear Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will NOTE:
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operadetection zones.
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apbeyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
contamination so that the BSM system can function located in the outside mirrors.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Warning Light
Sensor Locations
The BSM system can also be configured to sound an
audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to notify the
driver of objects that have entered the detection zones.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
Rear Monitoring
Side Monitoring
117
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
119
3
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
121
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
Blind Spot Alert
alarms, including radio muting.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING!
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
death.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio is also muted.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
• If the Hazard Flashers are on, the system will request Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you
the appropriate visual alert only.
to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond in your cellular phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone
on the radio or steering wheel controls (if
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected button
equipped)
and
follow the instructions to pair the cellular
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is rephone.
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
chime.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Phone
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
WARNING!
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar upward and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner control lever is on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then
push back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
WARNING!
DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seat Control
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the lever
downward. To decrease the support, rotate the handle
upward.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Eight–Way Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seats. The front switch controls the up/down,
forward/rearward and tilt adjustment. The rear switch
controls the recline adjustment of the seatback.
Manual Lumbar Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Front Switch
2 — Rear Switch
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for front heated seats are located on the
center instrument panel area.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
Second row heated seat switches are located in the
sliding side door handle trim panels and function the
same as front switches.
Heated Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Adjusting Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
3
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
129
Adjusted Head Restraint
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Active Head Restraint — If Equipped
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of an accident and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the
second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
To Fold Second Row Seats
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the
second row seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the 4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
⬙LOCK⬙ position and then pull up on the storage bin latch outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. To
to open the cover.
assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
3
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
Second Row Seat Release Strap
6. Close the storage bin cover.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unfold Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position, close
Second Row Seat Release Handle
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
3. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever, located on mechanism to the ⬙Unlocked⬙ position.
the outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its Easy Access Seating
full upright position.
The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats can be tilted forward
for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap located
on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat
cushion and tilt the seat fully forward.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
To return the seat to its upright position, push rearward
on the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it is
Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — If Equipped
fully latched.
Premium second row Swivel ’n Go™ Seating features
include:
• A table that installs between the second and third row
seats. The table disassembles and stows in the hidden
second row floor storage bin
• Seats rotate to face forward or rearward
• Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats
• Dual folding armrests
• A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone
or handheld game
Tilting Second Row Stow ’n Go威 Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Seats are removable
137
WARNING!
When the seatback release handle is lifted, the seatback will rotate forward. To avoid injury, if you are
not seated in the seat, stay clear from the area in the
path of the rotating seatback.
Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Features
1 — Moveable Armrest
2 — Seatback Release
3 — Swivel Release
4 — Fore-Aft Adjustment
5 — Seat Release
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboard Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allows
side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.
rotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle may
WARNING!
be released. The seat locks in position once reaching the
forward or rearward positions only.
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death:
• NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the
Swivel ’n Go™ seat while it is in the rearward
facing position.
• The swivel seat should be locked in the forward
position when using any child seat or infant
carriers, with the vehicle in motion.
• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go™ seating must
be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be
locked in either the forward-facing or rearwardfacing position.
Swivel Release
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make sure the Swivel ’n Go™ seat is in a locked
position with the release handle fully engaged.
Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn’t
swivel.
3
Removing Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating —
If Equipped
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the
seat, and stow the third row seat.
2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front
Release Bar
edge of the swivel seat.
3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seat
cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.
4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.
Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the
removal process.
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom front Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating Table —
edge of the seat.
If Equipped
The Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Table consists of an easily
Each seat weighs about 90 lbs (41 kg).
assembled post and top.
NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seats
automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed
or installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seat
is rolled to and from the strikers.
When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower the
release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Second Row Seating and Table
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in 3. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear.
use. To install the table follow these steps:
4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into
1. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row notch of the base.
seats.
3
Installing Table Leg Into Base
Table and Leg Storage
1 — Table Base
2 — Lock/Release Button
2. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook
5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.
and loop straps.
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the lock
button engages the base.
6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligning
with the mating feature of the underside of the table top.
Apply pressure on the table top and press downward.
NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the table
latch engages the pole.
WARNING! (Continued)
• NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole installed.
• DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.
• DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use
available cupholders.
• Second row seats must be locked in the rearward
facing position before installing the table.
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death:
• DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in
motion.
(Continued)
To separate the table top from the pole, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the table
top.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
NOTE: The table top should be removed from the leg
prior to removing the leg from its mounting base.
4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the release
button firmly to activate the release from the base.
5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in a
counterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward to
remove the pole from the base.
6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top and
secure with the hook and loop straps.
7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you may
place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second
2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release row seats.
from the pole.
NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floor
3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove the storage bin when not in use.
table top from the pole.
Table Top Release
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space. Release levers are
located on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. To
remove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotate
downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator button
pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly
Release Handles
can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posiEasy Out威 Rollers.
tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
3
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
Third Row Power Seat Switch — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
and the vehicle is in PARK.
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Tailgate
4 — Fold Flat
5 — Right/Left Seats
5 — Both Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of the
NOTE:
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small seat to lower the seatback.
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
3
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
To Fold Third Row Seats Manually — If Equipped
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.
Folding Third Row Seat Strap
4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold Third Row Seats
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the 1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” to
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors rotate the entire seat rearward.
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “3” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
3
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s
outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
Driver Memory Switch
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
Your
vehicle
may
have been delivered with two RKE
pressed.
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE
Transmitter to Memory
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sidethe ON position.
view mirror to the desired positions.
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory
position using the other numbered Memory button or to A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
Memory Position Recall
driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory one second will occur before another recall can be
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not selected.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
remove the key.
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
1.
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that (Available with Memory Seat ONLY)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
you are in the memory set mode.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
key from the ignition switch.
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
successfully disabled.
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
seat will return to its previously set position when you
transmitter.
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
the LOCK position.
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ • When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set To open the hood, two latches must be released.
position when you insert the key into the ignition
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
panel, below the steering column.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Hood Release Lever
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same
time.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Lever Location
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
All of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights,
headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled by
switches to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel.
155
Interior Lighting
Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
• Any overhead reading light is left on
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Positions
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control completely
Rotate the dimmer control to the first
upward to the second detent (extreme
detent. This feature brightens the
top position) to turn on the interior
odometer, radio and overhead dislights. The interior lights will remain
plays when the parking lights or headon when the dimmer control is in this
lights are on.
position.
Interior Lighting Defeat (Off)
Dimmer Control
Rotate the dimmer control to the off
With the parking lights or headlights
position (extreme bottom). The inteon, rotating the dimmer control for the
rior lights will remain off when the
interior lights on the instrument panel
doors or liftgate are open.
upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
Halo Lights — If Equipped
Headlights
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
Turn the headlight switch knob to the second
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
detent to turn the headlights and parking lights
locating specific features while driving at night.
on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
To activate the Halo lights, push in the Halo
switch control knob. Pressing the switch con- To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo rotate the dimmer control up or down.
lights off.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Parking Lights
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
to turn on the parking lights. This also turns on all the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
instrument panel lighting.
position aligning the indicator with the A (AUTO) on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF) When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
position.
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interAutomatic Headlights
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
159
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
will turn off in the normal manner.
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec- off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the three minute delay.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multiTurn Signals
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is operation.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
Washer And Wiper Controls
1 — Front Mist/Washer
2 — Wiper Speeds
3 — Rear Wiper/Washer
1. Mist, Front Wiper and Washer
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the
first detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressing
the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
163
cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds, seconds, to a maximum of 20 seconds between cycles.
or until the multifunction lever is released, and the The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less
than 10 mph (16 km/h).
wipers will cycle three times.
NOTE:
• If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the delay
range, the wipers will operate for several seconds after
the multifunction lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
Low-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.
High-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.
3. Rear Wiper and Washer
• If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the off
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
position, the wipers will operate for approximately
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
two or three wipe cycles and automatically turn off.
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed Wipers
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions tent interval.
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause beNOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifuncwiper speed only.
tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of
the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regulated from approximately two
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
shield.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
feature.
may reduce rain sensor performance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmisVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandvehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
following conditions:
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
previously) exist.
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above TILT STEERING COLUMN
freezing.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the steering column, below the steering wheel.
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the column, push the lever downward to the
unlocked position. Move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Pull the lever upward to the locked
position to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
1 — Locked Position
2 — Unlocked Position
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward, or away, from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
CAUTION!
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the button forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)
once, and the cruise indicator light (located in the message window of the odometer) will illuminate, showing
that the Electronic Speed Control system is on. To turn
the Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/
OFF button a second time, and both the Electronic Speed
Control system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
169
To Set At A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET lever
downward and then release. Lift your foot off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever (CANCEL) toward you will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed
memory.
Resuming Speed
To resume a previously set speed, raise the Electronic
Speed Control lever (RESUME ACCEL) upward, and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Varying The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.
Accelerating To Pass
Press the accelerator as you normally would. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set, downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever set speed.
in SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SET On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
until the lever is released. Release the lever when the Control.
desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be
established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. Refer
to ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limitations
of this system and recommendations.
171
ParkSense威 will remember the last system state (enabled
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN/ON position.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the InstruParkSense姞 Sensors
The ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/ ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense威 Warning Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
173
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
3
Park Assist Disabled
Park Assist ON
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a 1⁄2 second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will
show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY MESSAGE
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
ARC’s
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Park Assist ON
None
None
Warning Object Detected
78.7 in (200 cm)
3 Solid
Yes, 1/2 second
Warning Object Detected
39.3 in (100 cm)
3 Flashing
Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected
27.5 in (70 cm)
31.4 in (80 cm)
3 Flashing
Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected
25.5 in (65 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
2 Flashing
Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected
19.7 in (50 cm)
19.7 in (50 cm)
2 Flashing
Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected
15.7 in (40 cm)
15.7 in (40 cm)
2 Flashing
Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected
11.8 in (30 cm)
11.8 in (30 cm)
1 Flashing
Continuous Tone
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition
As soon as the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
ParkSense威 will not operate.
will display the “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after makformation. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
“PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message for as long as the
Cleaning ParkSense姞
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Service ParkSense姞
When the ParkSense威 system is malfunctioning, the scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could daminstrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per age the sensors.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞
You can turn ParkSense威 ON or OFF through the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
NOTE:
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
to keep the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system oper• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
ating properly.
sounding a tone.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense威 system.
• If a ParkSense威 system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Furtherdisplay “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”. If this
more, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
occurs making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
from snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see your authokey.
rized dealer.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the ParkSense威 system
not working properly. The ParkSense威 system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
179
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the ParkSense威 sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 to be able to stop in time when the
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The ParkView威 camera is located in the light bar over the rear
license plate.
181
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
(Continued)
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting 4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
again.
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, Infrared
Automatic Temperature Control Sensor (ATC equipped
only), two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass
storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door
switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
Front Premium Overhead Console Features
1 — Cupholder LED
2 — ATC Sensor
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage/Mirror
5 — Switch Bank
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
Sunglass Storage (non-sunroof only)
At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartment
is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door over-travel latch
to open the compartment. The door will slowly rotate to
the full open position. From this position, the door can be
fully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press and releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use.
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
From the ⬙conversation mirror⬙ position, the door can
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
only be closed. To return to the full open position, the
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
door must first be closed and then opened by pressing
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
the over-travel latch again to release.
arrows (LED lamps only).
NOTE: The front overhead console supplied with facThe area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
tory sunroof, incorporates a sunroof switch.
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
for added convenience.
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Overhead Compartment Features
1
2
3
4
1
— DVD 1
— Rear HVAC
— Interior Lights
— Storage
If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD 1
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
3
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
HomeLink威 Buttons
battery.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle SecuThe HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner rity Alarm is active.
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
187
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro• Some gate operators and garage door openers may gramming A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink威
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
follow these steps:
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
191
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica- Troubleshooting Tips
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
at this time.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
General Information
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
erased.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when two conditions:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be Power Sunroof Operation
received including interference that may cause undesired
Opening the Sunroof Manually
operation.
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with open fully, then stop automatically. During this operaFCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
expressly approved by the party responsible for com- sunroof.
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
WARNING!
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control switch is located in the front
overhead console.
The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation
or slides rearward under the roof.
In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing the Sunroof Manually
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sunroof travel at any point.
193
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Sunroof Sunshade Operation
The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof
Express Open
opens.
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
open.
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Express Vent
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
automatically open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”.
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Express Close
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Auto-Express with Anti-Pinch Protection
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three
times in succession. After the third time, Auto Express
will enter a manual operation mode. This allows the
operator to manually control the power switch, in order
to close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Ignition Off Operation
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occurutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
either front door will cancel this feature.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
195
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
Sunroof Maintenance
need to be replaced.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
lower instrument panel, next to the open storage bin. The
upper power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch
and the lower power outlet is connected directly to the
battery. The upper power outlet will also operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an
optional Smoker’s Package).
NOTE:
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 cigar knob and
12 Volt Power Outlets
element must be used.
One outlet in the removable floor console shares a fuse
with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also
3
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
connected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum
power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower
panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
197
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
3
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter switch is located near the center of
the instrument panel below the two 12 Volt power
outlets.
Power Inverter Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
CUPHOLDERS
There are nine cupholders in the interior. Two cupholders
in the center front instrument panel, four in the floor
consoles and three more are located in the third row
quarter trim panel.
All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible
liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one
edge for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
Front Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
201
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument To close the compartment door, firmly push downward
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the on the door’s surface to release the detent and latch the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash door closed.
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
There are both upper and lower glove compartments.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the upper
latch. The door will spring open about 1 in (2.54 cm).
Manually lift the front edge of the door upward until
fully opened and the detent is engaged.
Glove Compartment Features
1 — Lower Compartment
2 — Lower Latch/Lock
3 — Upper Latch
4 — Upper Compartment
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
handle.
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
that is part of the compartment handle (2).
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Front Door Storage
1 — Rear Map Pocket
2 — Storage Pocket
3 — Bottle Holder
4 — Front Map Pocket
Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder
Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into
the trim.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
203
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
3
Sliding Door Bottle Holder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of
the left front door entry scuff molding.
the second row seats. The area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Lock⬙ position
to allow greater access to the storage bin.
Umbrella Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
205
CAUTION!
NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
WARNING!
Storage Bin
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
207
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are two consoles available: Basic and Premium.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
209
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for 4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing downadditional floor space by removing the cap and clip at ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
the console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly Premium Console — If Equipped
higher than the rear).
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
bin offers multiple configurations.
hook.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
is centered on the winch hole.
cups or mugs with handles.
3
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
Premium Console Features
1 — Top Release
2 — Center Release
3 — Console Release
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large storage area below.
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
3
Console Position 2
Console Position 1
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 4
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
Console Position 3
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost console.
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin 2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers. centimeters.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
213
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove REAR WINDOW FEATURES
console.
Rear Window Defroster
To reinstall the console:
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
higher than the front).
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
on the floor bracket.
operation, press the button a second time.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
NOTE:
in the rear floor bracket.
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always be
sure the removable floor console is fully latched.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
215
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located
Crossbar
at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six
turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position, Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the properly locked into position.
crossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the
the crossbar into position.
crossbars ensure the embossed arrow is facing the front
of the vehicle. When the crossbars are not in use, the front
crossbar should be fastened just forward of the middle
3
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
support and the rear crossbar should be fastened at the
rearmost position of the side rails. This will help reduce
the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use.
The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
217
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
3
Sun Screen Retracted
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Anniversary . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Compass Display / ECO
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) —
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Personal Settings
▫ CMTC Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . .
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 243
244
246
248
250
252
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 258
▫ Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 262
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 263
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 270
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 271
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 281
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 282
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using
Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 289
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 297
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Three-Zone Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ A/C Air Filter— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage Bin
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
Climate Controls
9 — Storage or DVD
10 — Cup Holders
11 — Storage Bin
12 — Power Supply – 12V
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Switch Bank
Ignition Switch
Dimmer Switch
Headlight Switch
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ANNIVERSARY
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
1. Fuel Gauge
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
2. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads
“H“, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealer for service.
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer if
your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under
the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
when the turn signal lever is operated.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
229
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
9. Tachometer — Premium Instrument Cluster Only
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the prevent engine damage.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
10. Shift Lever Indicator
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the automatic transmission.
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxiNOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
PARK.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
231
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom11. Odometer / Trip Odometer — If Equipped
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
display resets (approximately two seconds).
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
12. Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift Gate Ajar
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
CRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control On
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press the Trip
Odometer button.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hood switch, in the
case of hood ajar, a warning message will be displayed
in either the PRNDL/Odometer display as “hood” or
“Hood Ajar” in the EVIC display.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-on
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
• Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the cycles.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle
gASCAP
Information Center Display Area located in the instruIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
ment cluster.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
Refer to ”Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
Display— If Equipped” / ”Electronic Vehicle Informa- area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
tion Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped” for further Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Reset button to turn
information.
off the message. If the problem continues, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
ECO / ECO-on (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-on indicator will illuminate when you are noFUSE
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
233
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom- cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
eter display area. For further information on fuses and performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your following procedure:
Vehicle”.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
CHAngE OIL
start the engine).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
within 10 seconds.
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
dependent upon your personal driving style.
13. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Reset Button
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
To reset a message display (gATE, gASCAP, noFUSE,
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
CHAngE OIL, LoCOOL, LoWASH), push and hold the
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
button until the display resets (approximately two secrelease the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
onds).
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light / Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
15. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
CAUTION!
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
235
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
light will come on when the ignition is first
This light warns of an overheated engine conditurned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apcheck. If the light does not come on during starting, have
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
to cool.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your 19. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authoThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
required and you may experience reduced performance,
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
may require towing.
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
18. Oil Pressure Warning Light
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
light should turn on momentarily when the engine unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns further information.
on.
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiThis light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until
vehicle is disarmed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for four
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
237
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gallons (7.8 liters) this light will turn on and remain on
until fuel is added.
23. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- 25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light —
ing system. The light should come on when the If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
should be checked monthly, when cold and
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
tires.)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
239
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the 26. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light /
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabilto continue to function properly.
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
CAUTION!
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
warning have been established for the tire size
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operamalfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
tion or sensor damage may result when using reBAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.
27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset
Button
Press the reset button to scroll through sub menus (i.e.,
Outside Temperature, Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units. Press and hold
the reset button for approximately two seconds to reset
the display shown.
NOTE: For more detailed operation, refer to “Compass
Mini-Trip Computer”.
28. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display /
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display—
If Equipped
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display —
If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC), the display provides the outside temperature, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio
station. For further information refer to “Compass MiniTrip Computer”.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
241
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaNOTE:
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimidisplayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler ™ gps
CMTC Reset Buttons
(Navigation Radio), the NAV system will provide the
compass direction, and the variance and calibration CMTC Reset Button
menus will be unavailable. The compass will perform Press the left reset button located on the instrument
accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the Earth’s cluster to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions:
AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
magnetic field.
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) —
IF EQUIPPED
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in the To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive dis- ON position, then press and hold the reset button for
play (displays information on outside temperature, com- approximately two seconds.
pass direction, and trip information).
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
messages will display:
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings are
displayed (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty
ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist On/Off
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
Should this wrench symbol display with the The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
letter P next to it, your Park Assist System driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
needs servicing. Contact an authorized dealer. modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO
(Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button on the instrument
cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B, or to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
Compass Variance
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
panel. This is where the compass module is located
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuand such devices may interfere and cause false comracy, the compass variance should be properly set accordpass readings.
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE:
• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
Compass Variance Map
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Set the Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approximately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programin one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
zone 1.
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu- ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feacompass:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the instrument cluster.
PARK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
245
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status display
• Audio Modes display
EVIC Menu / Step Control Button, as
it appears on the left side of the steering wheel spoke.
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the MENU button, and the
mode displayed will change between
Compass/Temperature, Trip, System Status,
and Personal Settings.
Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and
change Personal Settings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Press the STEP button to scroll through sub
Displays
menus (i.e., Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy,
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
the following messages:
Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/Temp
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
Control Button, as it appears on the
motion)
right side of the steering wheel spoke.
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
• Check TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” in “Starting And Operating”)
Press and release the Compass/Temperature
button to for instant access to the Compass/ • Turn Signal On
Temperature screens.
• RKE Battery Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LOW WASHER FLUID
• Oil Change Required
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
•
•
•
•
247
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as
interference is present.
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
Park Assist Disabled
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
Service Park Assist System
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warning in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park
this message is present see an authorized dealer.
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Oil Change Required
Spot System has been turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
Computer functions.
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) The Trip Functions mode displays the following information.
perform the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
start the engine).
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
within 10 seconds.
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
249
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Display Units of Measure in:
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle To make your selection, press and release the STEP
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
To Reset the Display
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the a second time, within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function (Reset ALL will display
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
during this three-second window).
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) —
If Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight
COMPASS compass readings, and the outside temperature.
Button
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem- does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
perature in the EVIC display. This message will appear compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass” is
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
displayed in the EVIC.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali- set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
bration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
EVIC.
compass must be set using the following steps.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” message, and the last variance zone number, displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the STEP button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAILABLE ,
followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
Use the Step button to display one of the following Auto UNLK On Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
choices.
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Language
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
When in this display you may select one of five lanmake your selection, press and release the RESET button
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
until ON or OFF appears.
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the RESET button while in this display to select English, RKE Unlock
Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian (Italiano), When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
you continue, the information will display in the selected Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
language.
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenAuto Door Locks
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
press and release the RESET button until “Driver Door
button until ON or OFF appears.
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. Pressing the
RESET button when in this display will select ⬙Yes⬙ or
⬙No.⬙
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90
appears.
Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Flash Lamp Lock
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will RESET button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
ON or OFF appears.
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tilt MIRR. In Reverse
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec.,
5 min., or 10 min. appears.
ILLUMIN. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
255
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert. By pressing and releasing the RESET button once,
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
Spot Alert Lights” mode. When this mode is selected the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
pressing and releasing the RESET button a second time
“Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In
this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert
Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is
deactivated.
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC
appears.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC, to make your
selection, press and release the RESET button. Refer to
“Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
information.
Door Alert
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate,
and remain on for up to 90 seconds, when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until OFF,
30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “SmartBeam™” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
257
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. When
OFF is selected, the system reverts to the standard
intermittent wiper operation.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disuser’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downSystem (VR) — If Equipped
ward is displayed.
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone —
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
If Equipped
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
downward is displayed.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
the word “Save” is displayed.
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
259
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
current setting:
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
1. Turn on the radio.
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Changing the Time Zone
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 1. Turn on the radio.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are disclock setting menu will appear on the screen.
played to change the current setting.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
Show Time if Radio is Off
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
the screen.
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
1. Turn on the radio.
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disClock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downUconnect™ gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to ward is displayed.
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
daylight savings information is set.
downward is displayed.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are disthe box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
played to change the current setting.
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Media Center 130 (RES)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
263
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
TIME Button
Electronic Volume Control
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 and radio frequency.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Clock Setting Procedure
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
set at the same volume level as last played.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
knob to save time change.
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
265
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
AM/FM Button
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to pressing the pushbutton twice.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
button number will display.
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button Buttons 1 - 6
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
267
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
button works in a similar manner.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
AM/FM Button
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranbutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in domly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threemally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
character extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
269
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96, 80,
64, 56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32, 24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
(MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
271
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
TIME Button
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the and radio frequency.
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
Clock Setting Procedure
details.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No
program
type
or
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
None
undefined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
275
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
to save time change.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
button number will display.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
277
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
MP3 Audio Play
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
NOTE:
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
279
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
character extension)
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threerates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rates.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96, 80,
64, 56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
281
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported by the radios.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
playable files).
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
283
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
equipped as an option with these radios.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
NOTE:
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
IF EQUIPPED
compartment on some vehicles).
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the • If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
not communicate with the UCI system until a minifeature to control the connected device.
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to Using This Feature
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in By using the provided connection cable to connect an
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
etc.) information on the radio display.
radio switches, as described below.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
NOTE:
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
• It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connecting the cable.
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
285
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
holding the FF >> button.
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
seconds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
playing a track, skips to the next track.
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and
SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next
tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
ON.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
List Or Browse Mode
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威 During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
mode to repeat the current playing track.
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
iPod威.
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticed.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
287
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next submenu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastiPod威.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
CAUTION!
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anysports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilwhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the limited coverage in Alaska.
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the System Activation
device and/or to the connectors.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
289
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
mode.
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
291
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
following items:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butOperating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
(If Equipped)
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia
(SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat TV™ offers three video channels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or
Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
293
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ —
IF EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ is
available with:
• One or two video screens
• Third row swivel screen — If Equipped
• Additional single-disc DVD player with two-screen
system
• Battery-powered two-channel remote control
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER • Two remote headphones
Navigation, RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia User
• Integrated remote storage in either screen location
Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
• Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
• Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
area
• Ten different medias to choose from in each screen
(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, Sirius Backseat TV™, DVD1,
DVD2, Hard Disc Drive (HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1,
AUX2)
The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compartment console.
Overhead Video Screens
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
295
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
4
VES™ Remote Control Location
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or Tape to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, after the current track begins to play.
depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op- second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
eration in each mode.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
Radio Operation
function in this mode.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
297
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
too high.
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective instrument panel, below the radio.
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System —
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
If Equipped
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
control to regulate the amount of air
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
forced through the system in any
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
mode you select. The blower speed
conditions.
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle.
Manual Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
299
Temperature Control
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Use this control to regulate the temMode control allows you to choose
perature of the air inside the passenger
from several selections of air distribucompartment. Rotating the knob countion. You can select either a primary
terclockwise, from top center into the
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
blue area indicates cooler temperaa blend of two of these modes. The
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
closer the control is to a particular
into the red area, indicates warmer
mode, the more air distribution you
temperatures.
receive from that mode.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
maximum
blower and temperature settings for best
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
windshield
and side window defrosting.
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a these modes only when necessary.
small amount through the defrost and side window Recirculation Control
demist outlets.
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
Mix Mode
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIRwindow demist outlets. This setting works best in
CULATION
mode to temporarily block out any outside
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
odors,
smoke,
or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
upon
initial
start-up
in very hot or humid weather.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times to
indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed.
301
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
• Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may Air Conditioning Operation
Push on this button to engage the Air
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
Conditioning (A/C). A light will illuoccur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
minate when the A/C System is en• In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULAgaged.
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
• In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULATION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULATION mode buttons at the same time.
Three-Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
–
–
–
–
–
–
Left Temperature
PANEL
BI-LEVEL
Front Blower
FLOOR
MIX
7 – Right Temperature
8 – Rear DEFROST
9 – RECIRCULATION
10 – Front DEFROST
11 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
303
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con- The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
trols rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
operations.
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel has
five positions; off, rear, and a range of blower speeds.
Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in
the rear (RR) position do the second row seat occupants
have control of the rear blower speed.
Front Lower Three-Zone Temperature Control Features
1 – Left Heated Seat
2 – Rear Blower
3 – Rear Temperature
4 – Right Heated Seat
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front
control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear Climate Control Lock
4 – Rear MODE
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
305
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the Rear Temperature Control
RR position do the second row seat occupants have The rear mode selection RR, allows the settings to be
controlled by the rear mode control knob.
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
CAUTION!
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
Rear Mode Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing side will shut off the airflow.
damage to the blower motor.
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
• Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
by a button press on the right rotary knob and a
floor outlets.
comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the
control unit.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- • The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
Floor Mode
cabin, if desired.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
The Three-Zone ATC System automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
comfortable temperature, even under changing condiselect individual comfort settings.
tions.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
307
4
Front Upper ATC Panel
1 - System On/Off
2 - Blower Indicator
3 - Left Front Temperature
4 - Rear Blower / Temperature
/ Mode
5 - SYNC Indicator
6 - A/C Indicator
7 - Right Front Temperature
8 - Front MODE Indicator
9 - Air Conditioning (A/C) On/
Off
10 - AUTO Mode / Blower
11 - Front MODE
12 - RECIRCULATE
13 - Front DEFROST
14 - Front Blower Speed
15 - SYNC
Front Lower ATC Panel
1 - Rear Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature / Rear
System On/Off
3 - Rear MODE
4 - Rear ATC Lock
5 - Rear DEFROST
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
1. Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
display, along with three temperatures for driver, front
comfort as quickly as possible.
passenger, and rear seats. The system will then automati• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elecsystem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passentronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customerger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
Programmable Features” in this Section.
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
ATC display, until the engine warms up. The fan will
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, or
function automatically.
by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed.
Automatic Operation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
309
Panel Mode
Manual Operation
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
be turned off when the system is being used in the and turned on or off to control airflow.
manual mode.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, seat passengers.
the temperature doors will continue to operate automatiBi-Level Mode
cally.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker also directed through the side window demister outlets.
button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
additional speeds are selected. This allows the front
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
4
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The SNOWFLAKE mode, or A/C button, allows
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
the operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE
air is directed through the defrost and side window
mode, and the ATC display is on cool, dehumidified air
demister outlets.
flows through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is
Mix Mode
desired, press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display, and deactivate
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
the A/C system.
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable, while keeping the windshield clear.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the SNOWDefrost Mode
FLAKE can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
Air comes from the windshield and side window
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best wind- • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed.
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
the display when this button is selected. Push the button
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected.
311
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is
on the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument
panel.
Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC
System from the front lower ATC panel, illuminates a
LOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front lower ATC
panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.
4
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner, near the 1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC
center of the vehicle.
panel. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
3 - Rear ATC Lock
4 - Rear MODE
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerProgrammable Features” in this Section.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
313
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
front upper ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Mode Control
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu- Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
pants.
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
Headliner Mode
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
side will shut off the airflow.
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
315
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
DEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Vacation/Storage
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in slush and snow.
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
A/C Air Filter— If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 325
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 351
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . 357
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 364 䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.3L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ E85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 3.3L And 3.8L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Vehicles E85 And Gasoline Vehicles . . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 374
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 377
. . . . 377
. . . . 379
. . . . 379
. . . . 380
. . . . 380
. . . . 380
. . . . 381
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave unattended children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
321
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure (Steps 1–3
above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
Automatic Transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
pressed to shift out of PARK.
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or –29°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
323
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the electrical cord
have enough power to continue running when the key to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the grounded, three-wire extension cord.
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
running smoothly.
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15– Module.
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before
driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord
could cause electrocution.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE,
PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when
the engine is above idle speed.
• Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system,
remove the cover located to the top right of the shift lever
in the instrument panel. The override can be activated by
pressing the white-colored tab, which can be accessed
through the hole in the instrument panel. While the
override is pressed, the shift lever can be moved out of
the PARK position without pressing the brake pedal.
After operation, return the cover to its original position.
325
This system prevents the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents moving
the shift lever out of PARK, unless the key fob is in the
ACC/ON position, and the brake pedal is pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission has only PRND shift positions. Downshifts are carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS)
by moving the lever—/ + while in the DRIVE position,
the instrument cluster will display transmission gear
selection as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed, and 4, 3, 2, 1 for
four-speed transmissions.
Gear Ranges
Do not race the engine when moving the shift lever from
PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this gear.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this gear.
Shift Lever
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
327
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key fob from the ignition switch, and apply the
parking brake. Once the key is removed from the
ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
(Continued)
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without pressing the shift
lever button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition switch from OFF to ACC/ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or shift lever
could result.
REVERSE
• When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
the way forward until it stops.
stop.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE – Six-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever — / + and
select the “5” range when frequent transmission shifting
329
occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions,
using the “5” range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
DRIVE – Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy
trailers). Under these conditions, using the “3” range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
DRIVE and select “5” range (on six-speed transmissions) or “3” range (on four-speed transmissions) by
changing shift points. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) when
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, this allows the
selection of the desired top gear. For example, if you shift
the transmission into third gear, the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but can shift down into
second or first gear automatically, when needed.
Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle
speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode, move the
shift lever to the left (-) once. The current gear will be
maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply press
and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” is
displayed in the instrument cluster odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Odometer Screen
Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed (SixSpeed Transmission)
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed (FourSpeed Transmission)
331
1
1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
remains in second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite
the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
1
1-2 1-3 1-4
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1
2
3
4
5
N
/
A
6
N
/
A
D
1–4
1. Stop the vehicle.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum 2. Shift into PARK.
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. 4. Restart the engine.
Reset Mode – Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear (third gear for six-speed). The transmission
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience.
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
service is required.
layer of water to build up between the tire and road
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precaupery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati- tions should be observed:
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front slushy.
(driving) wheels.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
333
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
335
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. Power Steering Fluid Check
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
Parking Brake
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
STARTING AND OPERATING
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
339
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed, or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Warning Light” is not on.
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
accurate signals for the computer.
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING
341
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic the ESP is in the “Partial Off” mode.
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” (in the instruSystem (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
ment cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
Stability Program (ESP). These systems complement the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
This indicates that the TCS is active. If the
braking capability during emergency braking maneuindicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the
vers.
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
Traction Control System (TCS)
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount conditions, and do not switch off the ESP or TCS.
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
343
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESP on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESP should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off”
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily
portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip”
pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done while
feature described in the TCS section, has been
the vehicle is in motion.
disabled and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off” mode, ESP ESP/BAS Warning Light
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
will operate without engine torque management. This
combined with BAS. The “ESP/BAS Warning
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
Light” and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” (in
snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
the instrument cluster) come on for four secthan ESP would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily press the onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
“ESP OFF” switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On” position, then goes out. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malmode of operation.
function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/
ESP Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch (located in the center switch bank, next to
the hazard flasher switch).
STARTING AND OPERATING
345
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
Tire Markings
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” come on momentarily, each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
5
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal. The sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive, following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedtion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designasize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
347
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
349
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
351
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Loading
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
the weight referenced here.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuof this manual.
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
STARTING AND OPERATING
353
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
NOTE:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
• The following table shows examples on how to calcucargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
[295 kg]).
• For the following example, the combined weight of
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure.
355
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and
the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
CAUTION!
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, altire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
consumption.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
which could damage the valve stem.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
357
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original-equipment information, or an
authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above
maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
• Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive faster than
50 mph (80 km/h).
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
359
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stopconventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the ping.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel Emergencies” for further information.
on the vehicle at any given time.
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
• Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds
continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
1 — Worn Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires 2 — New Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
replaced.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING
361
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors, including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
• Distance driven
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
for the size designation of your tire. The service descripWARNING!
tion and load identification will be found on the originalThe tires and the spare tire should be replaced after equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your
You could lose control and have an accident resulting original-equipment manufacturer, or an authorized tire
dealer, with any questions you may have on tire specifiin serious injury or death.
cations or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
363
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
smooth, quiet ride.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte(120 km/h).
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following found on the tire placard located on the driver’s-side
B-pillar.
diagram.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
365
Warning Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“TPMS Warning Light” will still be on. In this situation,
the “TPMS Warning Light” will turn off only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPMS Warning Lamp.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
NOTE:
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System
failure or condition.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
while adjusting your tire pressure.
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes Module.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
stopping ability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
367
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
The “TPMS Warning Lamp” will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, proWarnings
viding the system fault still exists. The “TPMS Warning
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illuLamp” will turn off when the fault condition no longer
minate in the instrument cluster, and an auexists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
dible chime will be activated when one or more
scenarios:
of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold sensors.
tire pressure value (located on the placard on the
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
driver’s-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically
that affects radio wave signals.
update and the “TPMS Warning Lamp” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
the wheels or wheel housings.
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “TPMS
Vehicles with Compact Spare
Telltale Warning Light” will turn off as long as no tire
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
pressure in the compact spare tire.
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road the TPMS to receive this information.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Premium System – If Equipped
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimsound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levon.
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
(25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash Module.
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
STARTING AND OPERATING
369
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
Low Pressure message for three seconds and a graphic
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compoflashing.
nents:
• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
5
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics displaying tire pressures
• Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
Low Tire Pressure Display
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Message
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault
is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
three seconds. This text message is then followed by a
graphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s)
indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.
Check TPM System Display
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will
no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message
STARTING AND OPERATING
371
will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis- 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
played instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
of the following scenarios:
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Warning Light” will remain on, a chime will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
value in the graphic display.
sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light”
that affects radio wave signals.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM
SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display
the wheels or wheel housings.
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on
Vehicles with Compact Spare
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
pressure value.
in the compact spare tire.
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below
the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the FUEL REQUIREMENTS
TPMS to receive this information.
3.3L and 3.8L Engine
All engines are designed to meet all emisGeneral Information
sions regulations and provide excellent
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
fuel economy and performance when usRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasofollowing conditions:
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
STARTING AND OPERATING
4.0L Engine
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
373
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality.
required.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoPoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will prostarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be- fuel system components.
fore considering service for the vehicle.
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
STARTING AND OPERATING
375
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
engine controller memory
higher than those allowed in the United States.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformuexposure to E85 fuel.
lated gasoline.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is Materials Added to Fuel
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without detergents or other additives are not needed under
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
life and reduces emission system performance in some Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline fuel.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT.
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
377
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
• To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT
inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
• NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.3L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve(Continued) hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
E85 Fuel Cap
E85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING
379
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline.
mended.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85
hard starting and rough idle following start-up, even if
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
E85 and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30% compared to gasoline operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
381
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
5
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Cap
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
STARTING AND OPERATING
383
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may VEHICLE LOADING
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
the vehicle is refueled.
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a specified GVWR and GAWR.
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
Vehicle Certification Label
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The label contains the following information:
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
• Name of manufacturer
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in • Month and year of manufacture
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear
dealer as soon as possible.
5
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
385
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
5
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING
LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Empty Weight
2,140 lbs
1,470 lbs
(971 kg)
(667 kg)
Load (Driver,
360 lbs (163 kg) 980 lbs (445 kg)
passengers, and
cargo/luggage)
TOTAL
2,500 lbs
2,450 lbs
(1 134 kg)
(1 111 kg)
GAWR
2,544 lbs
2,544 lbs
(1 154 kg)
(1 154 kg)
387
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will asA loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note that sist you in understanding the following information:
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
exceeded.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at- This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
GVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example.
5
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Operating” for further information.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
WARNING!
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
allowance for the presence of a driver.
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
389
Frontal Area
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying levermaximum width of the front of a trailer.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
Trailer Sway Control
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
Weight-Carrying Hitch
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
hitch is the most popular on the market today and they and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
trailers.
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer
or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING
391
5
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Max. GTW
Class
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING
393
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
3.3L, 3.8L
and 4.0L/
Automatic
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 1,800 lbs
(816 kg)
3 to 5 persons & Luggage 1,350 lbs (612 kg)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
180 lbs (82 kg)
135 lbs (61 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,800 lbs
380 lbs (172 kg)
(1 723 kg)*
3.8L and
4.0L/
3 to 5 persons & Lug9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
gage 3,350 lbs
335 lbs (152 kg)
Automatic
(with Tow
(1 519 kg)*
Package)
6 to 7 persons & Lug9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
gage 3,000 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire Safety Information/Tire
and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Towing Requirements
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
train components, the following guidelines are recom- GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended:
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
397
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
Towing Requirements – Tires
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
GVWR and GAWR limits.
spare tire.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
399
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
5
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING
401
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the shift
lever into third gear (with four-speed transmission) or
fifth gear (with six-speed transmission).
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Moving the shift lever into third gear (with • The six-speed automatic transmission is sealed and
four-speed transmission) or fifth gear (with six-speed
requires an authorized dealer to check the transmistransmission) while operating the vehicle under heavy
sion fluid.
operating conditions will improve performance and exElectronic Speed Control – If Equipped
tend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat build up. This action will also provide better engine • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
braking.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
you can get back to cruising speed.
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
maximize fuel efficiency.
NOTE:
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING
403
Cooling System
RECREATIONAL TOWING
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
heating, take the following actions:
• City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle
speed.
• Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
• Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flattowing with all four wheels on the ground) is not
recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Secure The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Towing With The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . 426
6
406
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the radio.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — Slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
shift lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
idle speed.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
407
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
408
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
• If it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from
under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit.
Jack Location
Jack And Tool Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. handle, and tools.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console.
409
NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removed
to raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to “Console
Features” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for console removal procedure.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch “T” Handle; to raise/lower the compact spare
tire/cover assembly.
6
Spare Tire Location
410
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
411
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
6
Jack Warning Label
412
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T” and
fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut, refer to “2”
configuration in tool graphics. Rotate the nut to the left
until the winch mechanism stops turning freely. This will
allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the
spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Tools
1A – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 1)
1B – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 2)
1C – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 3)
2A – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 1)
2B – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 2)
2C – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 3)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
413
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover
assembly from under the vehicle, refer to “1” configuration in tool graphics.
6
Tools
1A – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 1)
1B – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 2)
1C – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 3)
2A – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 1)
2B – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 2)
2C – Winch “T” Handle (Piece 3)
414
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper
Spare Tire Hook And Removal
jack placement.
4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retainer
tabs together.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
415
5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
• Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
• Front jack locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
side body, and align with front door edges.
6
Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs
416
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
417
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 5.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are 8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
sure the jack is securely engaged.
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the 9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
provides maximum stability.
lowered.
NOTE:
• Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel
covers.
6
418
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the 13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
left.
cover assembly. in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The 14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked a “T” and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
service station.
clicks at least three times.
12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
419
turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally, to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or vehicle.
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
WARNING!
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the comshould then be tightened to recommended torque.
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
provided.
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m).
CAUTION!
Secure The Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T”
and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate
the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
6
420
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
421
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
422
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
423
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
6
424
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth
between REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
(Continued)
425
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting
off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) to “Partial
Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
6
426
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(25 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is inoperative, or if the vehicle is to be
towed more than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels off the ground.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC positions.
427
Towing Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans- may occur.
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.3/3.8L . . . . . . . . . . 431
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 433
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
7
430
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 464
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 465
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker
And Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 478
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
431
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.3/3.8L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (3.3L Only)
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
432
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
433
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
7
434
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Unnance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaIndicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight- on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
ened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
435
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
a normal bulb check.
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will may then indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
7
436
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
437
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
7
438
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
been certified by the American
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
Change Engine Oil
API Certified engine oils.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.3L & 3.8L
Gasoline Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
439
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
“Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom“Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomfor further information.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica- are followed.
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
Materials Added to Engine Oil
should not be used.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adEngine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 4.0L Gasoline
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Engines
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating performance may be impaired by supplemental
temperatures. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the additives.
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
7
440
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainteoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, nance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
WARNING!
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
your area.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
at every engine oil change.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
441
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
7
442
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
443
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
444
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
445
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other
authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
446
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace
it more often.
447
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Windshield Wiper Blades
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriwindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaMOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
tions of salt or road film.
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
removed. Particular attention should also be given to from a dry windshield.
7
448
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
WARNING!
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor Commercially available windshield washer solvents
performance of blades may be present with chattering, are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is must be exercised when filling or working around
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid the washer solution.
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
Adding Washer Fluid
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
449
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Coolant Checks
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
7
450
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
451
Adding Coolant
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replaceengine cooling system.
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainperiod, it is important that you use the same engine
tain the proper level of protection against freezing accoolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid the vehicle is operated.
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 will require more frequent coolant changes.
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
Cooling System Pressure Cap
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are coolant recovery bottle.
anticipated.
7
452
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety preengine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
any ground spills immediately.
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the Coolant Level
pressure cap while the system is hot or under The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
gine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
453
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents
of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
454
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
mileage, and increased emissions.
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
Brakes
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake failure.
system components should be inspected periodically.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintethe cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
nance intervals.
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair
its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
455
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
456
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
All four–speed transmissions are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it
should be added through the filler tube.
All six–speed transmissions are equipped with a capped
dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
457
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position, ending with the shift lever in PARK. Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transmission.
Fluid Level Check (3.3L Engine with Four-Speed
Automatic Transmission) – If Equipped
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator on the
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
lower right side.
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the fingertips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
7
458
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Fluid Level Check (3.8L and 4.0L Engines with
Remove the dipstick and note reading.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission) – If Equipped
The six-speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
transmission fluid checked or serviced.
two holes in the dipstick).
Fluid and Filter Changes
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintethe lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
nance intervals.
If the fluid level indicates that it is low, add sufficient
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid to bring it to the proper level.
fluid and filter should be changed.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
459
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
• Stone and gravel impact
• Insects, tree sap and tar
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
7
460
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
461
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
finish.
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
If Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on ner:
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
7
462
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
clean vinyl upholstery
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
towel to remove soap residue.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
mended for leather upholstery.
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
Interior Care
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
use protectants or other products which may cause and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
restore the low glare surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
463
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any comCleaning Headlights
mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abraYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight
sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headrear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
lights.
right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
464
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are the buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Cleaning the Instrument Panel Cupholders
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Removal
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
at one edge to ease removal.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Cleaning
rag.
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
the cleaning procedure below.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
wash them.
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
465
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the
applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this
section. This center contains cartridge fuses and minifuses. A label that identifies each component may be
printed or embossed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
7
466
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Integrated
Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
Power Folding Seat
—
Power Liftgate
Module
Rear Door Module
(RR Door Node)
Driver Door Node
—
—
—
—
—
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
J8
J9
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
40 Amp
—
Green
40 Amp
—
Green
J10
30 Amp
Pink
—
J11
30 Amp
Pink
—
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
J13
J14
—
467
FUSES/TIPM
Description
Power Memory
Seat – If Equipped
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor/Flex Fuel
Headlamp Wash
Relay/Manifold
Tuning Valve
Power Sliding Door
Module/Anti–Theft
Module Relay Lock
Feed
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Main
Rear Window Defogger
Cavity
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
30 Amp
—
Pink
40 Amp
—
Green
20 Amp
—
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Rear Blower
Starter Solenoid
—
Powertrain
Control Module
Trans Range
Radiator Fan
—
Front Wiper LO/HI
—
Front/Rear Washer
—
Sunroof Module
7
468
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
15 Amp
Rear Center Brake
Blue
Lamp/Brake
Switch
—
—
—
—
20 Amp
Spare Fuse
Yellow
—
10 Amp
Trailer Tow
Red
—
25 Amp
Inverter
Natural
—
20 Amp
Power Outlet #1
Yellow
(ACC), Rain Sensor
—
20 Amp
Power Outlet #2
Yellow
(BATT/ACC
SELECT)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M8
M9
M10
M11
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
15 Amp
Blue
—
10 Amp
Red
Description
Front Heated
Seat – If Equipped
Rear Heated
Seat – If Equipped
Ignition Off
Draw — Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD, HandsFree Module,
Universal Garage
Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming Video Module
Ignition Off
Draw – Climate
Control System
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M12
M13
M14
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
—
30 Amp
Green
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
20 Amp
Yellow
469
FUSES/TIPM
Description
Amplifier (AMP)/
Radio
Ignition Off
Draw— Instrument
Cluster, SIREN,
Clock Module,
Multi-Function
Control Switch/
ITM
Spare Fuse
Cavity
M15
M16
M17
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Rear View Mirror,
Yellow
Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function
Control Switch,
Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug
Module – Export
Diesel Only, AssyShifter (Hall Effect),
Acoustic Noise
Cancellation
—
10 Amp
Airbag Module/
Red
Occupant Classification Module
—
15 Amp
Left Tail/License/
Blue
Park Lamp, Running Lamps
7
470
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M18
M19
M20
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
—
15 Amp
Blue
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
15 Amp
Blue
M21
—
M22
—
M23
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
FUSES/TIPM
Description
Right Tail/Park/
Run Lamp
Automatic Shutdown #1 and #2
Instrument Cluster
Interior Light,
Switch Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steering
Wheel
Automatic
Shutdown #3
Right Horn
(HI/LOW)
Left Horn
(HI/LOW)
Cavity
M24
M25
M26
M27
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
25 Amp
Rear Wiper
Natural
—
20 Amp
Fuel Pump, Diesel
Yellow
Lift Pump – Export
Only
—
10 Amp
Power Mirror
Red
Switch, Driver
Window Switch
—
10 Amp
Ignition Switch,
Red
Wireless Control
Module, Keyless
Entry Module,
Steering Column
Lock
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Powertrain Control
Red
Module, Transmission Feed, Transmission Control
Module
—
10 Amp
Occupant ClassifiRed
cation Module
—
15 Amp
Rear Wiper ModBlue
ule, Power Folding
Mirror, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
—
20 Amp
Back-Up Lamps
Yellow
—
10 Amp
Airbag Module, TT
Red
EUROPE
471
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M33
M34
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Powertrain Control
Red
Module, Transmission Control Module
—
10 Amp
Park Assist, Heater
Red
Climate Control
System Module,
Headlamp Wash,
Compass, IR Sensor, Rear Camera,
Lamp Door FT
Drv/Pass, Lamp
Flashlight, AHLM,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan
Diesel
7
472
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
M35
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Red
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
10 Amp
Red
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet #3
Antilock Brakes,
Stability Control
System, Stop Lamp
Switch, Fuel Pump
Rly Hi Control
Door Lock/Unlock
Motors, Liftgate
Lock/Unlock
Motors
are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused
by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s
seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located under the instrument panel near the
steering column. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for
service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may do the following:
• Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off
Draw (IOD).
The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
and removable floor console, when in the front position
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
473
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb Number
Backup, Tail, Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . LED (See Note 1)
Fog Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker, Park/
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27 / 7W or 3157
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 194
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately. The
CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your
authorized dealer.
7
474
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red
lock tab forward.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb. 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
headlamp housing.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
housing.
into the headlamp housing.
Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
475
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
bulb.
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
7
Removing Tail Lamp Assembly
476
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly.
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
scratch the paint.
lamp assembly.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
1 — Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Bulb Combo
2 — Backup Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
477
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly 3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
and pull the bulb out to remove.
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons
76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.3L and 3.8L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5 Quarts
4.7 Liters
4.0L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
3.3L, 3.8L, and 4.0L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
Engine Coolant
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Engine Oil – 3.3L and 3.8L Engines Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Engine Oil – 4.0L Engine
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.3L and 3.8L Engines RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 4.0L Engine
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection – 3.3L and 3.8L En87 Octane
gines
Fuel Selection – 4.0L Engine
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
479
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 482
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 484
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
482
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, CHAngE OIL will
flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, Oil Change Required will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emisindicator message will illuminate. This means that sersions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
individual using any automotive part that has been
(805 km).
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
483 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichlevel while the vehicle is on level ground will improve
ever comes first.
the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only
when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
mark.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
484
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, the
brake master cylinder, the power steering and the
S
C
transmission and add as needed.
H
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D
operation.
U
L
E
S
8
At Each Oil Change
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
485 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
487 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
489 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
491 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.†
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.3L and
3.8L engines).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.3L, 3.8L,
and 4.0L engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
493 M
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV Joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
495 M
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
497 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I † This maintenance is recommended by the manufacN turer, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.
T
E
WARNING!
N
A
N • You can be badly injured working on or around a
C
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
E
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 501
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 502
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 502
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
9
500
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
501
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
502
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
503
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-4852001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
504
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
505
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
3V9.
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
506
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
507
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
508
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
510
INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 451
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 440
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,445
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,311
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,306,444
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 302
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,77
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,81,102,237
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,74,77
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 71,74,77
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,477
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,194
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 306
INDEX
511
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 99
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,473
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,250
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,479
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,458
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457,458
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,479
10
512
INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,377
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,377
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,297
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,434
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,88,89
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,260,263,272
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,244,250
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,250
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,251
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
INDEX
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 283
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,452
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
513
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 450,477,478
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,464
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,300,310
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
10
514
INDEX
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Through Flowing, Rising,
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 293
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System
Brake Assist System . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Program . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
377
112
195
341
342
343
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 168
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,244
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,410
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 434,482
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,100,377
INDEX
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,477
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,477,478
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,477
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,100,377
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,441
Express Down Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
515
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,445
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,478
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,228,474,475
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,379
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
10
516
INDEX
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 478
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,236,474
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,381
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,477
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,383,433
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
INDEX
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,26,372
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,388
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,387
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . .
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
or Shallow Standing Water . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 122
. . . . . . . . . . . 333
. . . . . . . . . . . 406
. . . . . . . . . . . 129
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
157
474
463
159
162
474
158
158
113
128
298
323
161
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
392
186
153
207
10
518
INDEX
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,88
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,227
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
15
14
14
19
12
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 92
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
INDEX
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,155
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,81,102,237
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,474
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,236,474
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
519
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 234
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,474
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,474
10
520
INDEX
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 234
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,474,475
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 227
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,383,385
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 234,434
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,149
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,248
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
INDEX
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,504
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Navigation System (Uuconnect威 gps) . . . . . . . . . . 181
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,74,78
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71,74,77
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,240,247
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 233,240,247
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,478
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,478
521
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,477
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,477
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110,111
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 183
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,406
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,505
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10
522
INDEX
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 351
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 195
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 449,451
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . 288,293
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,311
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,427
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
INDEX
523
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,100
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . 288,293
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,101
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 59
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,89
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 295
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . 233,240,247
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,91
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
10
524
INDEX
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 450,478
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,260,263,272
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,160,228,474,475
Sirius Backseat TV™ (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . 293
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,409
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
INDEX
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,472
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,472
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 67
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
525
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 306
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 227,407
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 351
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,355,507
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,410
10
526
INDEX
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,352
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,355
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,427
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,479
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,479
INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 186
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,228,474,475
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . .
Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
283
122
204
507
283
186
372
462
527
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,251
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352,383,385
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,472
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
10
528
INDEX
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,194
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,448
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chrysler Group LLC
10Y532-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Download PDF

advertising